JP7208886B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a notification display for notifying that the given amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 A

A game machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed in various displays such as display of amount to be awarded and notification display. In addition, the game machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of displaying a display including specific characters in a favorable manner in relation to a background image.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
display means;
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
The display means is
A specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
A grant amount display relating to the grant amount of game value can be displayed on the front side of the specific display,
On the front side of the specific display, a first notification display is displayed when the amount of game value provided reaches the first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of game value provided reaches the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display any one of the second notification display and the notification display,
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has passed since the display started,
The character display included in the notification display has a display size larger than the character display used for the application amount display,
The character display included in the application amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character display is formed,
When the application amount display, the notification display, and the specific display are displayed at the same time, the specific character display used for the application amount display is such that the specific display is invisible from the specific region. ,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
Performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display when a start effect related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state) etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area and a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51, a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. It is possible (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and in the second display area, In the front side of the background image, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the amount of given game value (for example, the image display device 5 displays the given amount in the second display area 20SH52 in front of the background video. 20 SHK related to the number of awarded balls), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, to notify that the amount of game value imparted has reached a predetermined amount. As the notification display, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display at least in the first display area 20SH51 in front of the background image when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". As an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for informing that the number of winning balls is ``1000'' when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches ``1000'', the acquisition number notification display ``1000 over'' can be displayed. When the number of awarded balls reaches "2000" in the state, it is possible to display the acquired number notification display such as "over 2000"), is given (for example, the acquired number display 20 SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period of time elapses after the start of display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period elapses after the start of display). The characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the given amount (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20 SHKH are The characters used for the display 20SHK are larger in size than the characters used for the display 20SHK, etc.). (For example, the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.) The specific character is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK is such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the notification display The specific characters used are such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, etc.), and the display means means that the notification display is displayed while the application amount display is being displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is being displayed. etc.), furthermore, among the shooting means capable of shooting the game medium into the game area according to the player's operation, and the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, the guide display means for performing a guide display for urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path by using image display on the display means, wherein the guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display; 2 guidance display, wherein the guidance display means is a part of a start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and the predetermined period of time. In the period after the end of the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued, and the special after the control of the advantageous state is completed The second guide display is continued in another state.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. Further, even when the information display is displayed, the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the display of the amount to be given. In addition, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, during execution of a jackpot start effect as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575, a player is urged to shoot a game ball rightward by operating a ball shooting handle. Some were configured to give instructions to hit right. However, there is still room for improvement with regard to the instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. There is a demand for providing a game machine that can be executed favorably.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state for a player based on the fact that a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, and capable of shooting a game medium to a game area according to the player's operation. means for prompting the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. guidance display means for performing guidance display, the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means displays a display result of the variable display as the specific display result. In a later predetermined period, the second guide display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed. After completion, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued, and the advantageous display is continued. The second guide display is continued in the special state after the state control is finished. According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the game ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the like in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the acquired number display in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characterizing part 20SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by the ending background image in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the remaining count display and the remaining count notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning generate|occur|produces during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when over winning a prize in the characteristic part 19SH generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by over winning effects in the characteristic portion 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is a figure which shows the other example of production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided corresponding to the speaker 8L and 8R portions, respectively. Below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, a display device lower lamp 9f is provided. There is Further, in the vicinity of the general winning openings 10 provided at the lower left three places of the game area, general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are provided.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is. In the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side so as to enter the game ball into the big prize hole formed by the special variable ball game device 7 .

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The number of set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 042AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period of time when the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of winning balls is not increased is performed, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is performed. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, and includes a main lamp 9a, frame lamps 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lower display lamp 9f (the lower left lamp 9fL and the lower right display lamp 9fR), and the general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. In the characteristic portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described later in detail, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display lamp 9f (lower left display lamp 9fL, right lower display lamp 9fR), and general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are sequentially lit from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she should hit to the right by letting the player do so.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001; Yes), a waiting time for the effect at the start of jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. should be stored in After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, the setting for ending the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, the process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, and the processing of clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability variation state and the time saving state etc. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off at step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similarly to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

Also, when the small hit flag is off at step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the special figure fluctuation number count value after the update is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step 042AKS013 may be terminated. After performing end determination of such a probability variation state and a time saving state, special design stop processing is complete|finished. In addition, the end determination based on the special figure variation count value is performed only when it is a time saving state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" . Alternatively, for example, from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the probability variable state is extracted, and by referring to the probability variable state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 etc., the probability variable state is terminated. You may make it determine whether to carry out.

FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is ON at step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for the jackpot start effect (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", the predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit is It is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsing determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the effect is waiting for the start of the big hit. , it may be determined that it is not in standby for the performance at the start of the big win in response to the coincidence.

If in step 042AKS022 waiting for the jackpot start effect, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big win start effect at step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big win start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big win opening opening number counter is cleared. Then (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature part 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. An opening control pattern different from the type may be set. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable variation" or "non-probability variation", for example, different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", etc. Different opening control depending on the jackpot type May be set in a pattern.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting until the opening of the big winning opening in the next round (waiting for next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open standby end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is waiting for the next open, while if it matches If so, it can be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), it proceeds to step 042AKS023 and updates the game control process timer value. In addition, the game control process timer value updated at step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot at step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined that the next opening is not in progress at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the large winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, etc., and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning prize A special winning opening opening time is set as the upper limit of the time during which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is set to the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the big hit open process. After updating to 5″ (step 042AKS031), the big winning opening pre-opening process is terminated.

FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). At step 042AKS041, if there is no winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, at step 042AKS041, if there is a winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the big winning hole. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning prize number count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening of the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045 (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for the door of the large winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening is closed. (Step 042AKS046), and clear the winning number count value (Step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the specified command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the process during big hit opening is ended.

In this way, special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 10-2, big hit opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, big hit opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including jackpot opening post-processing and jackpot end processing) is executed, the transmission setting of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning mouth opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning mouth opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the production control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the production control board 12, so that the production control board 12 side , timings such as the start of the big win, the opening (start of the round) and closing (end of the round) of the big win, the winning of the big win and the end of the big win.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing performed within the effect processing during the big hit in step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined that the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in FIG. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

If it is determined that the hit end designation command is not received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the nR was started (elapsed of the nR predetermined period). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and its initial value is "1" and is incremented one by one in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game. When the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has passed since the nR-th round started. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the large winning opening is completely open (detection that the large winning opening door has moved to the position where it is completely open) A designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and counting of a timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the round game of the first round is started, the obtained number display indicating the number of obtained balls and the round indicating the number of rounds are displayed. display is performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the big win to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), every time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the big winning opening is received, the winning number is obtained. is continuously added by 15. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number. It takes a predetermined period of time to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be completed in time for the wins from the start of the first round game until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , the process of displaying "0015" may not keep up with the process of displaying "0015" despite winning ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening at the opening timing wins from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed In addition, a period is secured in which "0015" is directly displayed without "0000" being displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing. Taking this into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously shot game balls to enter the big winning opening is the shooting interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one after the opening of the big winning opening until the number of wins is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to an increase in the winning number display at the timing when the round number display is started due to an increase in the winning number in the state before the winning number display and the round number display are performed. can do. Although the predetermined period in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed after starting the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and incremented by 1 in step 042AKS066, and "1" is reached in step 042AKS068. cleared to In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n=1 by checking the value of n.

When it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect to suggest that the player should hit to the right, and also suggests that a big hit game state has occurred. The operation control of the fanfare effect is performed (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R. (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit production corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the processing of step 042AKS056, the prize winning is determined for a predetermined period from the start of the nR. When the winning designation command is not received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 to be described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called continuous game, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end timing of the continuous game. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, a mode (winning The light is emitted in a manner to notify that the Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the interest in the game can be improved. Regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time at the time of winning may be larger than that at the time of the jackpot effect. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, in addition to lighting the attacker lamp 9c, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning slot, and the game amusement can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n=1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of winning balls added at step 042AKS057 is displayed (display the number of winning), and the number of winning is displayed. After updating the display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. It should be noted that in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the processing of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls that was added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), after performing a count-up display (notifying display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of winning balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When it is determined that a predetermined period has passed since the nR was started in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. , and the operation control of the effect during the nR-th big hit is performed (step 042AKS061). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round, the display of the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions is performed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed at step 042AKS061. Specifically, when the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period elapses, the winning number is incremented by "15" at step 042AKS057. ), the number of wins has not increased in this big win since the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins is increasing) is performed as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21). Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the predetermined display indicating (as a specific display) (You can do this after uploading.) On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in this big hit. -22), as a predetermined display, display of the number of winnings (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased (in the case of consecutive games, the number of winnings at the time of the previous big win is displayed); display). In addition to "0000", the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased may be a display other than a number, such as "----" or "not increased". You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately displayed. , and the production effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. The production can be livened up and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the big win, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063), The attacking card 9c is illuminated, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, a count-up display (notifying display that the winning number increases) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R which is the next round of the nR has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). At step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined by whether or not a special winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the (n+1)th R is received from the main board 11 side. When the n+1R has not started, that is, when the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. . On the other hand, when the n+1R starts, that is, when the large winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), "1" is added to n (step 042AKS066) and various display processes exit. For example, if n=1, that is, in the first round, then n=2 at step 042AKS066. Although n=2 and this is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period elapses, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR-th round, is performed (displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061 after determination of Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined at step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the big hit effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and terminate various display processes.

Next, display timings for displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, etc., and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows a case of a so-called initial win (first big win) instead of a consecutive game.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when a combination of decorative symbols constituting a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7(b-1), the big winning opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player of the big hit, as shown in FIG. Various production effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the lamp 9g near the general prize winning opening are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 .

When the jackpot hits, as shown in FIG. 10-6, during the period until the predetermined period of the first round ends, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to inform the player that the player should hit right (FIG. 10-6). 5 step 042AKS054). The period from the big win to the start of the 1st R shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. All the production effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-handed performance is performed by displaying "Right-handed" in a large size on the image display device. Incidentally, the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. Display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamps 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, followed by FIG. 10-7 ( As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the lower left frame lamp 9, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the upper left side. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), since the big winning hole is in a closed state, the launched game medium does not enter the big winning hole at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path in the upper portion of the big winning opening door and is led to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the central upper part of the game board 2 lights up, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9 ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right portion 9 is lit, and as shown in FIG. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the lower right side. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, and then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player hits right on the performance effect lamps 9. A right-handed production that suggests will be performed. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right-hand shot. may be In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 is lit from the lower left side to the center and to the lower right direction, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 is lit from the lower left side to the center and right. Both of them may be lit simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right hitting effect on the effect lamp 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the display of hitting to the right on the image display device 5 continues (the effect of hitting to the right is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning opening comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indices such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, the As shown in (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the big prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be made faster). In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without turning off the light. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), when the big winning opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and FIG. As shown in (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. Before the 1st R is started (before the big winning hole is opened), the game ball launched by performing the right-handed effect (game ball hit early) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists in the upper part of the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st round. On the side of the effect control board 12, by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), and FIG. 10-10 (c-18) 2, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that a prize has been won. In addition, as described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is performed in a manner that is more than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light during the jackpot middle effect, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. example. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented without making the player feel uneasy. can be prevented.

10-10 (b-18) after the game ball has entered the big winning opening, or time has passed without winning from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19) after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. Since the execution timing has come and the execution timing for displaying the number of acquisitions has come, the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning opening before the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the second The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as an effect during the big hit (effect during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. The decorative patterns that make up the big hit displayed as the production during the jackpot (production during the 1st R) and the display of “during BOUNUS” are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10 to 20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right as shown at 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), a fanfare or right-handed effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big winning opening is opened, the effect during the big win is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), a symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, is displayed facing the front, and is displayed above "B" in the display of "BOUNUS". A star image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back right. A star-shaped image shifts to the top of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back left. , a star-shaped image shifts to the top of . Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the pattern "7", which is the decorative pattern that constitutes the big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "S" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image transitions back to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the big win effect, the decoration patterns that constitute the big win are moved in the right back direction, the front direction, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed rightward from the characters on the left of the display of "BOUNUS in progress". This suggests to the player that he should hit to the right by shifting the . The action display of decorative patterns and the transitional display of star-shaped images that constitute a big win are called effect displays. It includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the ball to the right, making it easier to recognize the hitting to the right.

In addition, during the big-hit production, the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20). In this example, a light emission pattern is set in which the effect lamps 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, the effect lamp 9 does not emit light as shown in FIGS. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lit after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed without the game ball entering the big winning slot, as shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emission pattern preset according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening in the 1R, the upper limit that can open the big winning opening period. In addition, along with the winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in , the acquisition number display of "0150" is performed. In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner notifying that a prize has been won. Incidentally, the upper limit period for which the big winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted from the elapse of the predetermined period for the winning of 10 game balls. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the interval between consecutive shots is 0.6 seconds, it is a period in which 10 prizes can be won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize hole in the 1st R, the maximum period in which the big prize hole can be opened is reached, so the big prize hole is opened as shown in FIG. controlled to be closed. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the big winning opening is completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the 2nd R elapses (until the predetermined period elapses after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed as shown in FIG. , the effect during the big win is continuously performed (the display of the winning number is updated according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the effect during the big win as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). to light up.

In the 1st round, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed. There is a case where a so-called over-winning in which the ball enters the big winning opening following the 10th game ball may occur. Even in the case of over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-win has occurred in the 1st round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning corresponds to the opening of the round. easier. Also, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10", the over-winning sound may be output. Also, the attacker lamp 9c may emit light in a mode corresponding to an over-win, which is different from light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the timing comes when the big winning hole is opened again, and the big winning hole is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). controlled to be At this time, it is determined as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIG. A display is made (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), when the big winning hole is completely opened and the game ball enters the big winning hole, unlike the first R, the step of FIG. 10-5 In the processing of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st round, even if the prize is won during a predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the 2R predetermined period elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and a big win middle effect corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the second R predetermined period elapses. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big hit production is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the production effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The performance during the jackpot to be played may be varied. The lighting of the production effect lamp 9 is the same. In this way, since the big winning hole is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, in each round of the round game for a plurality of times, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot into the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the opening of the big winning opening is controlled corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29) ), (b-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning after the big winning hole is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31) ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of wins acquired in the 1st R is displayed continuously. Thereafter, similar processing is performed up to the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command is received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to terminate. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the predetermined period, the display of the number of wins displayed in the previous round continues to be displayed, while if the prize is won during the predetermined period , the number of obtained balls is added to the display of the number of obtained balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning slot.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and reaches the upper limit period, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round Winning of game balls occurs. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-21), "0015" may be displayed as the display of the acquired number after performing the count-up display. Also, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win a prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize). As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed as the acquired number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the game interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time after the first round is started with the big winning opening opened. Then, if the game ball does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, a predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. When a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the obtained number is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, directly specifies without displaying the winning number of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the acquisition number display of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of winnings increases when the game ball wins the big prize hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , display the acquired number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the large winning opening. is started, and the acquired number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, by closing the large winning opening door, guides the launched game ball to the discharge route through the second route of the upper part of the large winning opening door, By opening the winning opening door, the shot game ball is guided to the big winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the game is interesting without giving the player a sense of unease. can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect is displayed to the player to indicate that he/she should hit to the right. According to this, since the game area to be shot during the big win is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side transmits a designation command while the big winning opening is open. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the game ball (fast-hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R starts (before the big winning hole is opened) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R, and the effect control CPU 120, when winning within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period, the specified Acquisition number display as display is performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round A game ball wins, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the jackpot game state has been reached while the big winning hole is in the closed state to the open state. After the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the winning number is displayed and the number of rounds is displayed, and an effect during a big win corresponding to the round game can be executed. According to this, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if the game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). Light 9c. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period can be visually recognized. easier.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. Light is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is more than the number of times of light emission per time. According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120, when a game ball enters the big winning opening during a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning opening, A winning sound corresponding to winning is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the round game after the second round is performed, the effect control CPU 120, if the game medium does not enter the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning opening, As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the display of the number of wins displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the game medium wins the big prize slot within the predetermined period. , as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), displays the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the winning from the display of the number of winning displayed in the previous round game. According to this, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed to before it becomes an open state corresponding to the second R. According to this, since the update of the win number display at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the win number display at the time of the next release, it becomes easy to determine which release corresponds to the win.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big winning hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the subsequent production and improve the amusement of the game.

10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round. 10-7(c-3) to 10-9(c-13), the production effect lamp 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, Regarding, for example, as shown in FIGS. The lamps 9 are lit alternately. According to this, the production effect lamp 9 can be used to suggest a right-hand shot. In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without extinguishing the light, thereby making the player aware that the big winning hole is in the open state.

Also, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is a period sufficient for ten game balls to win even if counted after the predetermined period has passed. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is illuminated after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. Let According to this, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the launch timing.

10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 emits the production effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the jackpot after the elapse of the predetermined period. Let According to this, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, displays the effect display of transitional display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute the big win, suggesting hitting to the right. mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, and the player can easily recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 turn on in order to suggest that the player should hit to the right. Although the example in which all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished after the right-handed effect by the effect lamps 9 is completed has been shown, this is just an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing when the big winning hole is opened (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be lit. According to this, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be lit continuously until a predetermined period elapses or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning hole is closed, the display of "1" out of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. It should be noted that the same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the maximum number of prizes to be won is 10 (maximum number of prizes to be won is 10), which is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened. , it may be arranged that if two coins are received within a predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over-win is awarded. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for the over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of the over winning. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is shown for the display of the winning number. good too. Since right-handed hitting is performed during the big hit, the general winning hole for winning the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIGS. 10-18 are flow charts showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 during the big win. Note that the description of the same parts as in FIG. 10-5 is omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS056 (step 042AKS056; No), a general winning showing that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( step 042AKS082). After executing the processing of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the processing of step 042AKS059 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not a general winning designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( Step 042AKS083), update display of the acquired number (step 042AKS085). When performing the acquired number update display in step 042 AKS085, the acquired number display is performed after performing the display of counting up (notifying display that the acquired number increases). After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing of step 042AKS065 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of an effect operation and the like in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are shown in Figure 10-10 ( a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, it shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). 10-19 (b-18A), after the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or from the state shown in FIG. Time passes without winning the winning opening 10, and when a predetermined period of time elapses as shown in FIGS. When a prize is won in mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. , the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and a count-up display is performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. During the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquired number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emission pattern preset according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Thus, even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to the winning in the general winning slot 10. FIG. Further, when no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number corresponding to the winning is also displayed for the game balls that have won the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display when the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means provides the game value when a game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating , a display corresponding to the game value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases, "0015" , etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins will increase.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means displays a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period of time has passed after the reception, the display of the amount to be awarded is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 side. etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable prize winning means is in the first state to lead the game medium to a prize winning path through a first path (for example, a large prize winning path). By opening the winning opening door, the fired game ball is led to the first path and leading to the big winning opening, etc.), and the second state is established to lead the game medium to the discharge path. Path forming means including 2 paths (for example, by closing the big winning gate door, the launched game ball is guided to the ejection path by passing through the second path in the upper part of the big winning gate door) and detection means (e.g., count switch 23, etc.) formed in the winning path for detecting the winning of the game medium, wherein the time from the path forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole will be detected within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, so that the game can be enjoyed without giving the player a sense of unease. A decrease can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, the player is asked to Performing an operation prompting display to promote the operation (for example, during the period from the big win to the opening of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), the game to indicate to the player that they should hit right).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which a variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side may transmit a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation prompting display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the shot game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a game ball shot by performing a right-handed effect before the first round is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media shot before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the final round game among the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball as shown in FIGS. 10-15 Device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a), the jackpot game state ends while being sandwiched, etc.), the first round game when controlled again to the advantageous state in the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the sandwiched game medium wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next big hit occurs, the game ball enters the big winning slot at the start of the 1st round, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the winning number is displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period until the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state , it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, during the period from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening, a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been executed) possible, etc.), along with the start of display of the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a round game display capable of specifying the round game being executed and an effect during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big winning opening is open, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game can be executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
Characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. When,
Control means (for example, CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.), and the display means can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given by winning the game medium to the variable winning means (for example, a winning number display, etc.), when the first round game among the round games is performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state The awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time. If not, after the predetermined period of time has passed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the acquired number), and the predetermined period of time is reached. If the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings). , light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9, etc.), and light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling said light emitting means, said light emission control means, said light emission control means, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the game medium When the variable winning means wins, and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the light emitting means is controlled with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium ( For example, when a game ball wins in a big winning hole, the attacker lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may be a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. etc.), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c). , The number of times of light emission per unit time is larger than the light emission of the predetermined light emission means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064). Alternatively, the effect lamp 9 may emit light more than the number of times per unit time (e.g., in the form of notifying that the player has won a prize).

According to this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is activated when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. A winning sound corresponding to winning is output, and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, a winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 044AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), a round game display that can identify the round game being executed can be displayed (for example, the number of rounds is displayed), and the first round of the multiple round games When a game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the awarded amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are performed. is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple round games are displayed. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second round game or later is displayed after the predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened.) If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions), and the game medium is changed within the predetermined period. When the winning means wins, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and at the same time, in each round of a plurality of round games, the specific display is performed. , it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is played for the second time or later. If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the above period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the round game after the second round is performed, If the game medium does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the big winning slot is opened, as shown in FIG. within a predetermined period after the variable prize-winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is performed for the second time or later. When the game medium wins the variable winning means on the first day, the given amount according to the game value given corresponding to the winning is added from the given amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium wins the big prize slot within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the winning number display displayed in the previous round game , the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the display of the award amount being displayed in response to winning of game media in the variable winning means. The update display of the awarded amount display is finished until the variable winning means once changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning may be completed within a period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R).

According to this configuration, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, wherein the light emission control means is the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is better is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning slot, the winning number is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. In this situation, for example, as shown in FIGS. The effect lamps 9 are alternately lit, and more effect lamps 9 emit light than during a predetermined period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and display the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time. It is possible to liven up the production after the is performed and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. It is possible (for example, to perform a right-handed display), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the When the application amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display while the specific light emission means is caused to emit light, and the application amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, until a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, see FIG. 10-7 (c-3 ) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 is sequentially lit to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and the big winning opening is opened. In the case where the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit later to suggest a right-hand shot, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is left lit without being extinguished as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). etc.).

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the next round game starts. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes an upper limit period in which the large winning opening can be opened.) After the predetermined period has passed, the time until the variable winning means enters the second state is It is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, as for the upper limit period for which the big prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after the predetermined period has passed for 10 game balls to win. period, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, in the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media are won, and the next round game starts (for example, 10 (e.g., the upper limit period for opening the big winning hole by winning a game ball), the time from the elapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is the game medium It is sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period for opening the large winning opening is sufficient even if counting from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the award after the lapse of the predetermined period After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is caused to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period of time elapses, that is, until the winning number is displayed). As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and as shown in FIGS. (e.g., the effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the advantageous state is controlled until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and the round game being executed can be specified along with the start of display of the given amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a round production corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, display the number of rounds, display the number of acquisitions, and perform a jackpot production after a predetermined period of time), and the execution timing of the production during the round is the same. Lighting the light emitting means at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the big hit, etc.) , may be

According to this configuration, at the timing when the mid-round production is executed, the production can be livened up at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning port 10) capable of winning game media, wherein the display means It is possible to display the awarded amount of game value imparted due to the game medium winning the general winning means as the imparted amount display (for example, display of the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning slot 10). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the grant amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, a predetermined display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded, such as "0000", is displayed, etc.). When the general prize winning means is won, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize means is displayed as the amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the predetermined period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). good too.

According to this configuration, since the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is also performed for the winning of the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area). provided, etc.), the display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win) at the same timing as the display of the award amount, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state An effect is displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, effect display , the decorative patterns that constitute the big hit are moved in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and displayed in a manner suggesting a right hit).

According to this configuration, the game area to be shot is suggested by the effect display, and the player can easily recognize the game area to be shot.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls given in the big win game state and the notification that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached a predetermined number. Acquisition number notification display and display are possible. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the number of wins is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to First Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing a background art related to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot game state, it may display the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the display of the acquired number of "points 120" is displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of acquired balls is 120. In the example shown in FIG.

For display of the winning number, numbers for displaying the number of winning balls and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the display of the winning number are used. The numerals used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The winning number display shown in FIG. 11-1(A) has the characters "points" for recognizing that it is the winning number display and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls. used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by the lines forming the character, and is an area not connected to the area outside the lines forming the character. Here, "not leading to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". and the case where the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the lines forming the characters" by the "lines forming the characters" but appears to be a different area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific area is a substantially circular area surrounded by curves forming the characters. The Arabic numeral "8" is formed with two specific areas. For the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed during a big win. The background image during the big win is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the big win game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device. If the background image during the big win changes over time, the line of the background image during the big win may overlap behind the display of the number of wins. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the display of the number of acquisitions, the big hit is behind the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). If the lines of the middle background image overlap, the line of the middle background image of the big win may be assimilated with the line forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "Butterfly" during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, The line of 'butterfly' in the background image during the big win is assimilated with the line forming the specific character '0', and the specific character '0' looks like the Arabic numeral '8' instead of the Arabic numeral '0'.

In this way, if the characters of the winning number display are misidentified as characters different from the original characters, it is impossible to accurately recognize the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the background image during the big win so that the line of the background image during the big win does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background. A first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the acquired number is , are displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the color of the line 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", and "6" , “8”, and “9” are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of wins, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of winning balls, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making it recognizable as the number of wins are also shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display for notifying that the number of awarded balls reaches a predetermined number in a big win game state. - 特許庁

Here, the time saving control and the variable probability control that are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, or before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and variable probability control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state The definite control and the time saving control may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state of plural times in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the obtained number notification display for notifying that fact is displayed. do.

When the number of winning balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the winning number notification display, a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number notification display is displayed. and are used. The numerals used for the acquisition number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters corresponding to the specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific area of the specific characters used for display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the winning number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the predetermined number, or the winning number notification display. Specific characters among characters other than numerals for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(Appearance of acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the obtained number display looks in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "cho" is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the winning number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the big win is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can recognize.

On the image display device 5, in addition to the winning number display 20SHK, a big win display 20SHO for recognizing that it is controlled to the big win game state, and a big win combination derived and displayed when it is controlled to the big win game state. A decoration symbol display 20SHZ indicating a fixed decoration symbol, a round number display 20SHR indicating the round number of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit to the right are displayed. It is The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also placed in the end regions that do not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device 5, similarly to the winning number display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display, and the winning number display 20SHK and winning. A character different from the character used for number notification display may be included. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4, "numbers" and "katakana" are used for the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display. Also, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display. In the round number display 20SHR, the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are the same type of characters as "numbers", and the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are different. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. The right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 for the winning number display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is a first display area 20SH51 and an area surrounding the first display area 20SH51. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH52 narrower than 20SH51. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image during the big win in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a big win display, a decoration symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole. In FIG. 11-4(A), since the acquisition number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the winning number display 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the big winning hole and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. It counts up by one until "1005". In that case, the number of 20 SHK obtained is passed through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a rounded number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the big win game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the big win game state is "2000". , the number-of-acquisitions notification display of ``Over 2000'' is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number at the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes Kiriban's "1000" A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-4(G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame-in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH started to be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move to the left edge of the area.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been started by stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period from that timing. display control may be performed to end the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH when .

As described above, the specific area of the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH.

Also, the characters used for the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number of acquisitions display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(D) to (H).

It should be noted that the effect mode when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode of frame-in the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, stopping and then out of the frame. For example, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame-in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be projected from the back side of the screen to the front side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually emerge. Alternatively, a character may appear and the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech balloon showing the character's lines. In addition, instead of rendering the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH out of the frame, it is possible to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side of the screen, or to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH disappear gradually. Alternatively, when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's lines, the character may leave.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of awarded balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display of "over 2000". The win number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started. The characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK. Characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display 20SHKH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. To make the background video during a big win invisible from a specific region of the specific characters, when the background video during the big win is visible from the specific region of the characters, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Therefore, the specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, unlike the winning number display 20SHKH, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the big win game state, but is started when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the winner, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. By doing so, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the big win in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Also, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals '0', '4', '6', '8' and '9'.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image during the big win.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the winning number display 20SHK allows the player to accurately grasp the number of winning balls in the big win game state.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is easily visible to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display 20SHKH, and the winning number display 20SHK and Characters different from those used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are included, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used for the big win display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize specific characters in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is frame-in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a game machine relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH, the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger than the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK for the area of the lines forming the characters. Portion size proportions small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, a three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to protrude from the front side. The area of lines forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during the big win, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used to display the number of wins and the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the three-dimensional characters used for notifying the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters and the size of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same as that of the area 20SHS21. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the region of lines forming the character includes the region 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS21 expressing the character and the The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character is the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located inside the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, ``0'', ``4'', ``6'', ``8'', and ``9'' correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background video during the big win, the background video during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in modification 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for display of the number of wins and the 3D characters used for display of the number of wins in the modified example 1. FIG.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-stereoscopic characters and the size of the area 20SHI1 forming the 3D characters. The size of the area 20SH31 representing the character in the area of the lines is the same size. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 express the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 representing the depth of the image is the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are displayed in three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. The combination is displayed in one of display modes A to G, which are different from each other.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with three color gradations: "red" for the upper area 20SHSU, "orange" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode B are colored with three gradation colors: "orange" for the upper area 20SHSU, "yellow" for the central area 20SHSC, and "green" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with three gradations of "yellow" for the upper area 20SHSU, "green" for the central area 20SHSC, and "light blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode D are colored with three gradation colors: "green" for the upper area 20SHSU, "light blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with three color gradations: "light blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "purple" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters of the display mode F are colored with three gradation colors: "blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "purple" for the central area 20SHSC, and "red" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with three color gradations: "purple" for the upper area 20SHSU, "red" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode A→ . . , and displayed while changing with time.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a change in color accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in the modified example 2. FIG.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), when the obtained number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the obtained number notification display is moved (frame-in/out). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition count notification display changes differs between when the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquired number notification display takes 0.35 seconds to move (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51. , from the display mode A to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes from display mode D to display mode G in order while it is stopped for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and displayed. After that, the acquisition number notification display is moved (framed out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, while the display modes G to C are sequentially displayed. Change.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display "over 2000". The winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time elapses after the display is started. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for displaying the number of wins. Further, the specific characters used for the display of the number of acquired characters have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the display of the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background video during the big win is visible from the specific area, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Also, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters. The area of the lines that form the three-dimensional character includes an area that expresses the character and an area that expresses the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the acquisition number notification display.

In addition, as described above, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in order to congratulate the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, even if the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, the risk of misrecognizing the character can be suppressed. By making the background image visible during the big hit from 20SHI3, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the specific character used for displaying the number of wins in the modified example 1, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible not only to suppress discomfort even if the background image during the big win is not visible from the specific area of the specific character, but also to prevent the background image during the big win from being visible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent misidentification of characters.

Further, as described above, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display in Modification 2 are displayed in three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. Then, the image display device 5 sets the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → . . . When the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out), the acquisition number notification display is changed. The speed at which the display mode changes differs.

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquisition number notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Description of Third Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a game machine relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is finished, the pachinko game machine 1 executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a result display that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state while displaying the ending background image.

For the result display, numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the result display, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific area of the specific character used for result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for the result display is transparent. is displayed in the display mode.

Of the characters used for the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. A specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals indicated by -8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIGS. 11-10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a reservation-in-reservation advance notice suggesting control to the jackpot game state corresponding to the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot game state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIGS. At timing T1 at which a round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the reservation notice is started.

When the reservation notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). In front of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the reservation notice is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the reservation notice.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image "flame" line is superimposed on the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK, Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of the "flame" of the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started at timing T2, the effect control CPU 120 End the Renso notice and start the ending production. When the ending effect starts, in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the ending background image starts to be displayed with a predetermined brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image of falling cherry blossoms falling from the back of the screen is displayed. In addition, in front of the ending background image, characters of "jackpot end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 ends the on-hold advance notice before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is being displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending advance notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect image 20SHE of the reservation preview is displayed when the ending background image is not displayed.

The ending background image may be an image displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11D. There may be In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the falling cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image are dancing over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. Reduces the brightness to a specific dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the falling cherry blossoms have stopped, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A), (B), and (E). Also, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11-10(E). It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a setting suggesting effect using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is configured to be able to display the above-described ending background image as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of falling cherry blossoms are falling from the left and right cherry trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not necessarily suggest whether the setting value is low or high. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the ending background image may have different presentation modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the setting value is not "6". Also, the ending background image may have a different rendering mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned Renso announcement on hold is one of a plurality of types of announcement effects for heralding the degree of reliability of a big hit, but the setting suggesting effect by the Renso announcement on hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to progress of the round game in the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the big win game state in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a reservation advance notice suggesting that it will be held. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 to notify the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK. The characters used in the winning number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHRE for notifying the reservation are not visible from the specific area. On the other hand, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation. can be preferably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. Since it may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the Sho notice, if the background image during the big hit or the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. However, by making the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation inside the reservation invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since it does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice, the ending background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set value. The effect image 20SHRE of the pending notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for predicting the degree of reliability of the big win, but the setting suggesting effect by the pending notice is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggesting effect by the ending background image is executed, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image with a predetermined brightness. Then, at the timing T3 when the result display 20SHRE is started to be displayed, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and also displays the ending background video with a brightness brighter than the specific brightness. Display the result display 20SHRE.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Description of Fourth Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the remaining number of times display relating to the remaining number of times of the ST number in the variable probability state, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. and the remaining number of times notification display can be displayed. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the remaining number of times is such that the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the display of the number of remaining times.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
11-12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

In a pachinko machine, basically, when comparing a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a variable probability state, a time-saving state, and a jackpot game state, and a normal state, the game is played in the normal state rather than the period in which the game is played in the advantageous state. is designed to be longer.

For example, in a pachinko machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of pending information is stored, when the upper limit number of pending information is not stored. A shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed. And, in the probability variable state with the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to progress the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the variable probability state accompanied by the time saving control.

In the variable probability control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either the condition of when the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed or when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is established first. end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" while the variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control ends when the special figure game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. . Note that the predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the end of the jackpot game state, one of the following conditions is established first: that the special game is executed for a predetermined number of time-saving times, or that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit". end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time saving control is performed, the time saving control ends when the special game of the predetermined number of time saving times is completed. . In addition, the predetermined number of times of time saving is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, it is good also as a value different from the setting value of the number of times of ST, and the setting value of the number of times of time saving.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), there is a case where the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining times" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of ST times being 30 times.

For the display of the remaining number of times, a number for displaying the remaining number of STs and characters other than the number for recognizing the display of the remaining number of times are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 11-12(A) includes the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that it is the remaining number display, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of STs. and numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the background image during ST is displayed in such a manner that the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the variable probability state. The background image in the ST includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the remaining number of times is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device. If the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap behind the display of the remaining number of times. Then, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining count display, ST is displayed on the back of the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). When the lines of the medium image overlap, the lines of the background image in the ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the background image during the ST merges with the line forming the specific character "0" so that the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistakenly recognized as a character different from the original character, the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing examples of display modes of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times is , is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-13, the color of the line 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of remaining times is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of 8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the background image during the ST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the pun, and the characters are displayed to the extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 that forms the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of STs, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making the remaining number of times displayed are shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the display of the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

When the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a remaining number notification display for notifying the predetermined number.

When the number of remaining times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times notification display includes a number for displaying the predetermined number of times, and characters other than the number for making the remaining number of times notification display recognizable. and are used. The numerals used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the display of the number of remaining times is displayed in a plurality of modes with different transmittances. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen through the line area.

In addition, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the character background is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is visible, the area 20SHS71 for expressing the character is transparently displayed. This area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-14, specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image can be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transmissive manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the remaining count notification display is displayed in an opaque manner, and since the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the characters, the area expressing the characters A specific area 20SHI7 is an area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner circumference side. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining count notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and since the area 20SHS71 representing characters is displayed transparently, the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is expressed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B is the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of Remaining Count Display in Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST overlaps behind the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, the specific region 20SHI6 is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image in the ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining count display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays a winning count display 20SHK, a right-handed display 20SHM, and a variable probability display 20SHRU for recognizing that the variable probability state is controlled. there is Acquisition number display 20SHK, right-handed display 20SHM, probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the end area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to impede the visibility of the decoration pattern, like the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain different types of characters than the characters that can be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, "numbers", "hiragana" and "kanji" are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. On the other hand, the variable probability display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of characters from the characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquisition number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, katakana, is used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH, and the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right-hand hitting display 20SHM, and the odd probability display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right hitting display 20SHM, and the odds display 20SHRU are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI6 for the remaining number display 20SHST, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining count display and remaining count notification display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20 SHST each time the variable display is executed. to display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times is started to be displayed in a non-transmissive display mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display of 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, and 10 times indicated by the remaining number display is started. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is started in a non-transmissive display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17B to 11-17D, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-17, when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is a display where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has passed since the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH has started, the effect control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transmissive display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed since the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is changed, the effect control CPU 120 The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches the predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of STs may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not transparent so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period including the second period of display in the transmissive display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended in the one variable display.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described above. On the other hand, the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transmissive remaining time information display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to allow the user to recognize the display result of the variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transmissive display mode is a variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. is set to end before the timing at which the display result in the variable display is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display result of the variable display can be favorably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived. Because of the change, the identification information behind the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the lines forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the ST background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state on the front side of the ST background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times displayed on the front side of the ST background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, there is a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and "When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50" 50” can be displayed. The remaining number display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is performed. On the other hand, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include specific areas surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the background video during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the ST background image. For example, when the player confirms the remaining ST number in the variable probability state, the remaining number display 20SHST is confirmed, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, If the background image in the ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, the specific character can be accurately recognized. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

In addition, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized when the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player. .

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the obtained number display 20SHK from deteriorating due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. Displayable (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image during the big win corresponding to the big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the area, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background video during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (20 SHK, etc., can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, the amount of game value provided is a predetermined amount. As a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the first predetermined amount, and a first notification display that indicates that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 displays at least in the first display area 20SH51 the number of prize balls given in the big win game state on the front side of the background image during the big win. Acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, and when the number of awarded balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display "1000 over" is displayed. display is possible, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 2000", etc.); It is updated each time a game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed when game balls are paid as prize balls in the jackpot game state). updated each time it is displayed, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK are larger in size than the characters used for the display, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters including specific characters formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.); The specific characters used to display the award amount are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the big win cannot be seen from the specific area. etc.), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image during the big win is visible from the specific area. possible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is intended to congratulate the player when the amount of game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and since it is displayed with large size characters in the wide first display area, the background image is made visible from the specific area of the specific characters, which is called the first display area. It is possible to show the background image even a little at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters are Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6", "8", "9", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, the image display device 5 displays the obtained number It is also possible to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while the display 20SHK is being displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the information display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the display of the amount of giving.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes more noticeable to the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of game value awarded in an advantageous state has reached the predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means can display a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area ( For example, the image display device 5 can display the big win display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. , the characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display, and characters different from the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display. , Any type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right-handed display 20SHM) The characters used include the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. The type of character also includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.), the specific character used for the specific display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the specific character can be accurately recognized even for the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it can be controlled in a jackpot game state), and display means (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51 that is the first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than ), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display a background video during a big win corresponding to a big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the background video in the second display region (For example, the image display device 5 can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given on the front side of the given game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the given amount on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of winning balls can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount. As displays, there are a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state in front of the background image during the jackpot in at least the first display area 20SH51. When the number of awarded balls reaches ``1000'' in the jackpot game state, the win count notice display of ``over 1000'' can be displayed as the win count notification display for notifying that the player has won the jackpot game state. When the number of awarded balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display such as "over 2000"). (For example, the winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.). display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the display of the number of acquisitions is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started), and the notification display is larger than the characters used to display the awarded amount (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions). etc.), the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, (e.g., a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character). Yes (for example, the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the display of the awarded amount. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of The ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the region of the line forming the is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area representing a character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). , the background video during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the amount of the game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the meaning of congratulating a person, is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the characters is small, it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentifying the characters even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character. can increase

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific character used in the above may be such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible to suppress discomfort even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific character. can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period has passed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line regions forming the characters (for example, the modification of the characteristic portion 20SH in the second mode). 2, the line area forming the characters is displayed in three-color gradation, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character modes used for the acquisition number notification display in the following manner: display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → . The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 or when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped. The speed at which the acquisition number notification display changes may differ depending on whether the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state that allows the game to progress faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to control to a variable probability state with time saving control that can progress the game faster than the normal state, etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means , the background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 , the background image can be displayed during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, in front of the background image, it is possible to display the number of fluctuations display regarding the number of fluctuations in the special state (for example, an image display device 5, in the second display area 20SH52, on the front side of the background image during ST, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST number in the probability changing state can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, In front of the background image, as a frequency notification display for notifying the number of times of change when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a predetermined value, the number of times of change is notified when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of times of change when the value of the change number of times display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 may display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the ST background image, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed by the remaining number of times display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. A remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times displayed by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50. , etc.), the display of the number of times of change is updated each time the variable display is executed. (For example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number of times notification display ends when a specific period elapses after starting the display ( For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has passed since the display started), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are more than the characters used for the variation number display. Large size characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH should be larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST), and the number of fluctuations display and the number of times notification display The characters used include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by lines forming the characters). The specific character used for the display of the number of fluctuations is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific region (for example, the specific character used for the remaining number display 20 SHST is the specific region 20SHI6 to ST background video cannot be visually recognized, etc.), and the specific character used for the number of times notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area The specific characters are characterized in that the background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the change count display and the count notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, the specific characters may look different from the original characters, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters are accurately recognized. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not always displayed like the variable number display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the variable number display reaches a predetermined number. Since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It is possible to show the background image even a little.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transmissive mode in which an image on the back side can be seen through an area of lines forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the count notification display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is "left", "middle", including the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the identification information while displaying the number-of-games notification display, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 can (When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the number-of-times notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value that has been given (for example, the image display device 5 , can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls, etc.), and display the number of times notification display (for example, image display The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from deteriorating due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means indicates that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the first background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. background video can be displayed during a big hit, etc.), and at least in the first display area, a second background video corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that suggests the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display , on the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending game, which suggests that it will be controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the stored pending information, etc.); In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the first background image, a given amount display regarding the given amount of game value given (for example, the image display device 5 can display the following in the second display area 20SH52 In the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls, etc.), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, Notification of the amount of game value given in the advantageous state on the front side of the second background image (For example, when the ending background image is being displayed, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20 SHRE that informs the total number of awarded balls can be displayed, etc.), and the characters used for the result notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the awarded amount display (for example, The characters used for the result display 20SHRE should be larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.). Contains specific characters that form a specific area surrounded (for example, the characters used in the win number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters) etc.), the specific character used for the display of the amount to be given is such that the first background image and the specific suggestive image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20 SHK is the specific area The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20 SHRE of the notice of the reservation inside Renso are not visible from the background image, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image that is visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the application amount display including the specific characters in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestive image, and display the result notification including the specific characters in conjunction with the second background image. It can be conveniently displayed in relation. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. Since it may overlap with the suggestive video, if the first background video or the specific suggestive video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. By making it impossible to visually recognize the background image and the specific suggestive image during the big win from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestive video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It is possible to show the second background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" can be set), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestive images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20 SHRE of the pending notice is a predictor of the reliability of the big hit. Although it is one of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the setting suggesting effect due to the pending advance notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image with a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image with a predetermined brightness). at the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. Display the result notification display with a brightness brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 temporarily suspends the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. and displaying the result display 20 SHRE with brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 19SH)
Next, a game machine related to the characteristic portion 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 19SH displays the winning number of the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big win game state, and the number of winning balls to be given in the big win game state. and a display of the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of prize balls. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of winnings invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the display of the expected winning number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Production action when a prize is won during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls given by entering the , and a scheduled winning number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by a central bracket line "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator. 20SHK2 is arranged and is displayed in a fractional format, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator. 12-1(A), the winning number display 20SHK indicates that 135 balls are given as the game balls enter the big winning opening in the big win game state, and are given in the big win game state. This indicates that the total number of prize balls to be played is 1500.

Also in this embodiment, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In the second display area 20SH52, the big win display 20SHO, the decoration pattern display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed. , a right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. In addition, on the image display device 5, a background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big win game state. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the background image during the big win is displayed on the display layer arranged behind the display layer on which the win number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and the prize ball is given, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the effect mode as shown in FIGS. Update the value of 20SHK.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and a prize ball is awarded, the effect control CPU 120 first, as shown in FIG. In the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7, the display of the effect display is started. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(D), the effect display 20SHEF is moved to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, so that the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when game balls enter the big winning hole, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2(D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(F), the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK becomes visible after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When it becomes , it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1, which has been focused on, has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when over winning occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that the big winning hole is closed when the tenth game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game. A so-called over winning may occur in which the 1st game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the win number display 20SHK according to the effect mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When over winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening, as shown in FIGS. Effect display is started in a display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), a tornado-like effect display 20SHEF is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning presentation is started for notifying that an over-winning has occurred. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the image display device 5 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs, as an over-win effect, an over-win sound different from the normal win-win sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over-winning sound of "picon picon" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the normal winning sound as an over winning effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated as shown in FIG. 12-4(D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(D), by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible after the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. can be confirmed.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably recognize that the values of the obtained number display 20SHK1 and the expected number of obtained display 20SHK2, which have been focused on, have been updated.

In particular, when over winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given due to the over winning. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the number of winning balls has been increased by the number of winning balls.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(G), the display of the over-win effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-win effect is ended, and the background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the set value, and is configured to be able to execute the above-described over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "People!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect by the over winning effect may not definitely suggest whether the set value is low or high. For example, when the set value is set to a low value, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set to a high value In addition, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the over-winning effect may differ in the effect mode depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Also, the over-winning effect may be different in effect mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or when the set value is an even number.

(If there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes did not win and rounds in which over prizes occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and rounds in which over-winning has occurred in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the timing when the predetermined period elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A) to (B), in one round of the round game, although there were 9 prizes, before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-6(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, an ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 becomes a value smaller than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2. , and the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won, and there were rounds in which over winnings occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the effect operation when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes are not won and rounds in which over prizes are won in the characteristic portion 19SH.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12-7 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 winnings, before the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK1 value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of the round game are executed is 1500, but over winning occurs in the 3 rounds of the round game. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the value of the final winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 do not cause discomfort. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 which can be changed between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or cannot win a prize. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when the jackpot game state is controlled. . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win effect when an over-win occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 displays the winning number display 20SHK1 related to the number of winning balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. A planned number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is rendered invisible or difficult by the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated, a sense of incongruity is caused more than when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated while the number of expected acquisition display 20SHK2 is visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special variable prize winning device 7 can be represented by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 but also the number of acquisition display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see.

Further, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect indicator 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 before the value is updated due to the attention on the effect display 20SHEF.

Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over winning effect continues, a sense of discomfort caused by the updating of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of an error detection code and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can resume the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquired number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the restoration of power supply, or displays a specific number such as "????/????" The acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a prize is won in the round game after power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over winning effect by the image display device 5 if it can be specified that an over winning effect has occurred in one round of the round game after the restoration of power supply, and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to execute an over winning effect by the attack lamp 9c. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by means of a effect control command that notifies that an over-win has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, if over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and the display Means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.), a variable that can be changed between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win Winning means (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win), Control means (for example, pachinko) capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when being controlled to the advantageous state; The game machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state.) a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media wins the variable prize winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can , including a production control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the display means is provided when the game medium wins the variable winning means It is possible to display (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and a planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when game media greater than the predetermined number win the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the second awarded amount display is visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second application amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 updates the effect table (e.g. updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the display 20SHEF), Start the specific effect before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) , characterized in that

According to such a configuration, when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated, a sense of discomfort is caused more than when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated while the display of the second application amount is visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The game machine of (1) above includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R), and the specific effect execution means uses the specific effect as the specific effect. An effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. executable, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the specific production.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the game medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area near the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 is configured so that the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). Then, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be represented by the display effect on the display means, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the specific display makes not only the display of the second application amount but also the display of the first application amount invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have the effect display 20SHEF moved. is visible at times, and becomes invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first application amount display and the second application amount display in the state before the value is updated due to attention to the specific display.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect executing means may perform the above-described Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that the game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the display of the second award amount is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when the device is used.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, setting means (for example, pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the setting The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific effect.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display of the effect display 20SHEF is (e.g., ending the over-winning effect after finishing).

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the display of the second applied amount can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continuing, the sense of incongruity caused by the update of the display of the second applied amount can be eliminated. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time-saving state)
In addition, in each characteristic portion and each modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state, the form of transitioning via the big hit state and the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates is illustrated. , the invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving design is derived and displayed as a special design, it may be shifted to a time-saving state without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 .

In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be used as part of the winning design or may be used as part of the small winning design.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

In addition, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used in combination with other patterns such as a small winning pattern or a winning pattern. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same. However, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be a different probability between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for the time saving pattern, even when using a dedicated random number or using another random number, the timing at the time of winning the starting port good.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, if a dedicated random number is used, the lottery result by the dedicated random number will be the winning value, and if a small-hit design random number is used for the time-saving design lottery, a specific small-hit design The random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery determination value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery determination value can be used as the winning value, and the lottery using the structure, for example, the special variable winning ball A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the fact that the game ball passes through the time-saving area may be regarded as winning of the time-saving design.

When the time-saving pattern lottery is performed using a structure and the small winning pattern is used together with the time-saving pattern, the number of times of variable display of the time-saving state is not changed depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed.

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be the timing after the big hit determination. Incidentally, the lottery for the time-saving symbol is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability state, but is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, regardless of which random number value is used for the lottery. However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, whether the number of times of time-saving is reset or whether the lottery is not performed may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Further, when the number of times of time saving is different according to the time saving pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the time saving pattern between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, the derivation lottery of the time saving end pattern may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

In addition, in the case of lottery using a structure, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is in the high-probability low-base state when the amusement center opens, and the high-probability low base state is maintained a specified number of times. After the variable display is executed and finished, control may be performed to the time saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state, etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is the first display and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes the first display area 20SH51, a second display region 20SH52 that is a region around the first display region 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display region 20SH51, etc.), , the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. or the like), in the second display area, in front of the background image, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of the game value given (for example, the image display device 5 may display the second display In the area 20SH52, the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), and at least in the first display area, the game value is displayed on the front side of the background image. A first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the given amount of game value has A second notification display that notifies that the predetermined amount has been reached (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first display area 20SH51 on the front side of the background image, and is given in the jackpot game state. The obtained number notification display 20SHKH notifies that the number of awarded balls has reached the number of "Kiriban", and "1000 over" is displayed when the number of awarded balls reaches "1000" in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the winning number notification display, and display the winning number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", etc.). The awarded amount display is updated each time a game value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20 SHK is displayed in the jackpot game state. is updated each time is paid out as a prize ball, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH starts display such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the acquisition), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, the number of acquisition notification display The characters used for 20SHKH are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display are enclosed by lines forming the characters Including specific characters forming a specific area (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc. ), the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied (for example, the background image of the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized from the specific area). and the like), the specific characters used for the notification display allow the background image to be visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image to be visible from the specific area). etc.), the display means displays the notification display when displaying the display of the amount to be given (for example, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, display 20SHKH for notifying the number of acquisitions, etc.); guidance display means for performing a guidance display for prompting the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path out of the two flow paths, using an image display on the display means; The display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means starts control of the advantageous state in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect to be notified, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is performed. continuing the guidance display, and during a period after the predetermined period, ending the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display; A game machine that continues the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished is mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. Further, even when the information display is displayed, the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the display of the amount to be given. In addition, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

That is, the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the application amount display. Since the background image is visible from the bottom, the amount display can be always easily confirmed even though it is a small character, while the notification display can be displayed in large characters to the effect that the predetermined amount has been reached without hiding the background image. An instruction to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized in a first guidance display and a second guidance display in a predetermined period after a display result of variable display becomes a specific display result, and thereafter the first guidance display is taken over. By taking over the second guide display and instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction without overemphasizing the instruction, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed, and the second guide display is performed first. to discreetly instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction from now on, then make the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, give a firm instruction to shoot the game ball in the predetermined direction by the first guidance display. can be done. In other words, to provide a game machine which, when installed in a game hall, allows a player to easily grasp the amount of game value to be imparted, to easily recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached, and to easily instruct the direction in which the game ball should be shot in an advantageous state. can do.

Furthermore, the game machine can suitably display the display including the specific characters in relation to the background image, and can suitably execute an instruction prompting the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. As an example of the form of (1), a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, wherein a game area is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player. A shooting means capable of shooting a medium, and a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, and an image display indicating that the game medium is shot toward the second flow-down path. guidance display means for performing a guidance display for prompting the player to use the guidance display means, wherein the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display; During a predetermined period after the specific display result is obtained, the second guide display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the After completing the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed. is continued, and the second guide display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the game machine according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 13-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the inner side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 13-4). V big prize opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 13-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state, so that characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp made up of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 13-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit right, and a variable state , a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishment of lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 075F030. In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is allowed to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right-handed display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second reserved storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 13-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
13-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved indications of the circle. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. are doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, the decoration pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-6 to 13-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 13-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the probability of hitting the jackpot after the game state ends, the base after the game game state ends, and the variation time after the game game state ends , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes V difficult to win (for example, the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning opening is shorter than a predetermined time, or the lid The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as far as the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare effects, and round effects are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round) in the same manner as the 5R probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 13-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type to be one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even if the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 13-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 13-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 13-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 13-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 13-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 13-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 13-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 13-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-8 (B) and (C), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LED in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than the jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol for the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, two bytes, the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In the following description, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 13-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is provided with a first pending storage buffer (storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or a second pending storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y at step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 13-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 13-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values There is provided a normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 13-8(A) are set) which is set smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 13-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbols should be a big win symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 13-8 (C) One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 13-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 13-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence relationship between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win class is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 13-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big-hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big-hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big-hit type, and when the big-hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 13-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 13-13 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y at step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening pretreatment)
FIGS. 13-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning hole open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIGS. 13-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 13-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize slot or the V big prize slot is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passing designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process of step 075FS510 is shifted to do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIGS. 13-16 are flow charts showing an example of the process after the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 13-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 13-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer set with the jackpot end time (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 13-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 13-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main substrate 11 . For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the production control CPU 120 executes a fanfare production by controlling the production device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the effect during the round is executed by controlling the effect device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V probability variable suggesting effect (see FIG. 13-41) set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 13-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 13-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guidance display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, it continues to aim at V and executes the effect (see FIG. 13-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R probability variation big hit, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 13-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, an ending production (FIGS. 13-46, 13) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 075F has the content of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, the following description will be given in particular to the portion of the game related to the characteristic portion 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. In addition to displaying the image, in the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is finished.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big prize winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th R, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled in the time-saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round is the low-probability-high base state, and in the case of the 5R-probability-variable big win or the 10R-probability-variable big win, the game state after the big win round is the high-probability-high base state.

Even in the variable probability state and the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also called consecutive chance win) occurs.

As described above, there is a 10R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot in the second special game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
13-19 to 13-21, the timing of main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 13-19 are timing charts showing an example of the process during the winning variation. FIGS. 13-20 are timing charts showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 13-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the big win. 13-19 to 13-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit occurs, at t3 after that, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability variation suggestive effect (see FIG. 13-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 13-42) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 13-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 13-42) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 13-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V prize effect (see FIG. 13-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short working time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 13-60) that can identify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 13-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
13-22 are explanatory diagrams showing the lighting modes of the lamps. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 13-22 (A). Represented by

In the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up, as shown in FIG. 13-22 (B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 13-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. Figures 13-23 to 13-33 and Figures 13-38 to 13-50 are explanatory diagrams showing presentation modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 13-23(b1) to FIG. 13-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 13-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-23(b1) to 13-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 13-24 (c1) to FIG. 13-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-24(c1) to 13-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is an effect part in which an effect for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), (c3), as will be described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and uses image display of characters and graphics as described later in FIGS. A large right-handed promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production to congratulate the jackpot. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed on the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 13-24 (c4) to FIG. 13-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 13-34 to 13-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location is not referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 13-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 13-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, left board lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 13-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 13-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect, and is referred to in each time period. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. As for the attacker lamp 9c, the 2000 msec, which is the execution time for the promotion effect of hitting to the right, is subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are specified. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

13-36 and 13-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 13-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 13-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 13B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 13-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T2 the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, and then at T3 the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 13-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 13-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 13-37, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is turned on. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. After that, at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. lights up, each lamp continues to light in seven colors thereafter, and at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out. lights out. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, then the middle X lamp, and the right X lamp, so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 13-37 also shows data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 13-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Also, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the color of the predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 13-25(c4), description will be given of the effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare effect. As shown in FIG. 13-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-27(c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-29(c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-29(c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot!!" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the first series of large right-handed promotion performances is completed.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26), the second big right-handed promotion effect is started. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion effect. Thereby, when the transition to the jackpot round is started after the big right-hand hitting promotion effect ends, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the big win round and the sound in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 13-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second hard hitting promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first hard hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first big right-handed promotion performance, a sound (for example, queuing sound effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, thereby effectively affecting the player. While it is possible to encourage hitting to the right, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-hand hitting promoting effect in the second big hitting to the right promotion effect, so that the BGM during the subsequent big win round. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the place to aim. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, an effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R variable probability jackpot, but the other effects are the same as the 5R variable probability jackpot. In addition, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-hand promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage of FIG. 13-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 13-39(d3) to 13-40(e4) on the basis of the special prize opening open specification command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3), the background image during the big win round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various methods in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to change the transparency (transmittance) gradually from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (c26) and (d1), the first layer transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-38(d2), the player sees only the white image on the second layer of the screen, which is positioned deeper than the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering to , the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the background image switching display" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player cannot see the image. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (promotion of right-handed hitting) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 13-41(e5) to 13-42(e8) on the basis of the special winning opening open specification command (A102 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-41 (e5) to 13-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big winning opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open specification command (A103 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming for V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . 13-44 (e14) and (e15), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-44 (e14) to FIG. 13-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the effect of aiming for V is continuously executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), during 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 13-44 (e16) ~ Figure 13-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V prize has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize gate and the normal big prize gate remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open specification command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e21), when the 5th round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . It should be noted that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-46 (f1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image for selecting a stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f2), during the ending production, a name image indicating the name of the probability changing state along with the character image (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 13-48 (g1) and (g2), the performance control CPU 120 stores the data of each performance in FIGS. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the lapse of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 13-48 (g3) to FIG. 13-49 (g5). It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-48 (g3) to 13-49 (g5) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . 13-50 (h1) and (h2), the performance control CPU 120 sets each performance data based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the lapse of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, and further , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 13-40 to 13-46, various effects such as a V notice effect, a V aiming effect, and a V winning effect are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 13-46 and 13-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed, and a right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 103 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 13-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovery from power failure during the fanfare effect due to winning one special figure. 13-51, as shown in FIG. 13-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 13-51, a state in which an image (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations!") congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 13-24 (c2) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5 when the power failure occurs. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 13-39(e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 13-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 13-52, as shown in FIG. 13-20, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during 1R, and then power cut-off 2 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 13-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during the round after one big win at the time of winning one special figure. Power interruption shown in FIG. 13-53 is power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-53, when an image corresponding to an effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 13-54, as shown in FIG. 13-20, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during 2R, and then the power cut-off 4 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-54, in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 13-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored between two rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 13-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-42 (e9)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovering from the power interruption during the round after three rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 13-56 is the power interruption 6 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the round after the 3R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after the 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-43 (e13)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 13-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during four rounds of big wins at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 13-57, as shown in FIG. 13-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-44 (e16)), when the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when a power failure occurs while the V is aimed and the small right-handed promotion effect is being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both of them are common to each other, and after returning from the power failure, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 13-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored between the rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 13-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-45 (e18)) between the rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 13-59, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 5R, and then power interruption 9 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 13 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 13-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 13-60, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the power interruption 10 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored is assumed. .

As shown in FIG. 13-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the big win game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of FIG. 13-47 (f4)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to display the character image "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 13-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), and the second guidance display. A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect suggesting hitting the small right),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 13-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), aim for V While ending the image display corresponding to , the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57. The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 13-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion performance is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 13-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 13-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the suggestive effect of hitting the small right are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), V While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect When power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure during the display), and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15) (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57). The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 13-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R is completed (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued (for example, FIG. 13-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 13-44 (e15) As shown, the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 13-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for the V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57. The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion performance is displayed, the player can be urged to continue to right-handed in the subsequent game even if the power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-39 (e1) to 13-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect is not performed during the round),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 13-48 and 13-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guidance display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 13-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group preview effect) (for example, the image display by the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5)). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. Further, the player can be urged to always hit to the right by continuously executing the small right-hand hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 13-25 to 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple times of the guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (c26) to 13-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan big hit with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 13-25 to 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (c26) to 13-33 (c29), the second sound A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 13-25 to 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after extinguishing the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2 hit, the speakers 8L and 8R will produce a large right-hand hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 13-25 to 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for promoting the right-handed stroke includes only the sound data associated with the first right-handed promotion. Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIGS. 13-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 13-35) and the corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 13-36 and 13-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. Absent. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 13-25 to 13- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 13-38 (d1) 13-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), the small right hitting promotion effect is switching of the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 13 -49 (g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-25 (c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that is first lit in the big right-handed promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big hit round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round, fade-in and fade-out Although the execution of switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as white-out inserting a pure white screen or black-out inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the production mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, a white-out effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the ready-to-win effect, or a black-out effect in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used. It may be possible to use the effect of pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or the visibility of the decorative pattern is difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. It is also possible to use a presentation effect that makes the In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but also pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located on the upstream side of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-25(c4) to 13-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In the present embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 13-24 (c1) to 13-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. 13-21 ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the "advantageous state" period is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) during which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit with one special figure, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and a frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, there is a special mode (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, display an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or display a variable winning ball. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic portion and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and the small hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as winning of the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. , You may perform the time-saving fanfare production which alert|reports the start of control of a time-saving state in the meantime. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result specification command indicating normal loss variation without time saving as a command for specifying loss, and time saving is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol determination time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and the symbol determination time when a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation is received. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, sounds congratulating the time saving state are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2), while the name image ("time saving RUSH") is displayed by the time saving fanfare production, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 13-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) ~ FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-48 to 13-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), the short-time fanfare production is executed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with the execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, when the game (fluctuation) following the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration from being executed and hindering the time saving fanfare performance. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display devices 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start switch 22B Second start switch 23 Count switch 25A First reservation display 25B Second reservation display 25C Normal figure reservation display 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passage gates 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control for microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
104, 124 random number circuit 106 RTC
110 switch circuit 111 output circuit 123 display controller

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
display means;
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
The display means is
A specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
A grant amount display relating to the grant amount of game value can be displayed on the front side of the specific display,
On the front side of the specific display, a first notification display is displayed when the amount of game value provided reaches the first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of game value provided reaches the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display any one of the second notification display and the notification display,
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has passed since the display started,
The character display included in the notification display has a display size larger than the character display used for the application amount display,
The character display included in the application amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character display is formed,
When the application amount display, the notification display, and the specific display are displayed at the same time, the specific character display used for the application amount display is such that the specific display is invisible from the specific region. ,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
The gaming machine performs the first guidance display and the second guidance display when a start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed.

Images